Table of Contents
1
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
3
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln. Please take the time to
get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The
more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an
accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel
supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden
vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the
Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
4
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
6
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC supplement for more information.
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling;
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
7
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC supplement
for more information.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
8
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
9
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Airbag - Front
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Speed Control
Stability Control System
Master Lighting Switch
Fog Lamps-Front
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fuse Compartment
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Defrost/Demist
10
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Interior Luggage
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Fan Warning
Explosive Gas
MAX
MIN
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Power Steering Fluid
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Jack
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Check Fuel Cap
11
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ЉService engine soonЉ
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ЉService
engine soonЉ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
12
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the on position
!
P
BRAKE
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the
brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to no, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound
when there is a malfunction in the indicator light.
13
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder chime feature.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction
with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Traction Control (if equipped):
Flashes when the traction control
system is active. It will be
illuminated solidly if there is a fault
with the system and traction control
will be disabled. Have the system
serviced immediately. Refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
Severity indicator: Displays the
indicated severity color when any of
the following warning conditions has
occurred:
• Red: Low Oil Pressure, Charge
System, Engine Coolant Over Temperature, Door Ajar
• Amber: Low Fuel
Refer to Message center in this chapter.
Low tire pressure warning (if
equipped): Illuminates when your
tire pressure is low. If the light
remains on at start up or while
driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and
14
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Loading chapter. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light
does not turn on, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
For more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
O/D off: Illuminates when the
O/D
OFF
overdrive function of the
transmission has been turned off;
refer to the Driving chapter. If the
light does not illuminate, have the transmission serviced soon, or damage
may occur.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Turn signal chime (if equipped): Sounds when the turn signal lever
has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is
driven more than 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
15
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed. Refer to the
Message center in this chapter to
change your display to a digital
speedometer. The digital display is
more accurate than the analog
gauge and may not match.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool, refer to
What you should know about fail-safe cooling in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
16
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Refer to Message center in this
chapter on how to switch the
display from Metric to English and
the odometer to the speedometer.
Trip odometer: See TRIP A/B
under Message center in this
chapter.
Hour meter (if equipped): Your
vehicle may be equipped with an
hour meter to indicate how much
time the vehicle is idling in Park or
Neutral. The meter is incorporated
with the vehicle odometer. Press
and release the message center
INFO button until “ENGINE IDLE 0
HOURS” appears in the display. Press the RESET button to reset. For
every hour that the vehicle idles, it has accumulated the equivalent of
approximately 33 miles (53 km) of driving. Using the combination of the
vehicle odometer and hour meter allows the fleet manager to better
determine when the oil needs to be changed.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
17
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the on position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
The arrow near the fuel pump icon
indicates which side of the vehicle
the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
MESSAGE CENTER
With the ignition in the on position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message
center for a display of status. The
system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of
system warnings followed by a long indicator chime.
Your display can show up to three reconfigurable telltales at one time.
What ever is displayed in the top left corner has the highest priority.
Premium Display Severity Indicator (located under the message center):
Indicates severity of the information being displayed on the premium
display. Red for high severity, amber for medium severity, and non-lit for
information only. For example, a door ajar warning would be
accompanied by a red indicator, low fuel by an amber indicator, and fuel
economy by an absence of the indicator. The indicator always illuminates
with the highest severity rating of the warnings displayed.
18
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Info (Information menu)
Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features
listed:
Press the RESET button reset functions in the information menu.
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the
trip mode). Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to reset.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
MILES (km) TO EMPTY
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will display FUEL LEVEL LOW and sound a tone for
one second when you have approximately 50 miles (80 km) to empty. If
you RESET this warning message, this display and tone will return
within 10 minutes or 10 miles (16 km).
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
AVERAGE FUEL XX.X MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled (kilometers traveled by liters used), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
19
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
FUEL ECONOMY MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly to cycle the message center through
the following features listed:
Press SELECT to select functions in the setup menu:
PRESS SELECT TO BEGIN SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press SELECT and the message center will
begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the
item if needed.
20
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
1. OIL LIFE
— HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL
2. WASHER FLUID
3. AIR SUSPENSION (if equipped)
4. RECONFIGURABLE TELLTALES
— OK
— FAILED RED
— FAILED AMBER
5. PARK AID (if equipped)
SCREEN FORM
Press SELECT to change the display:
• ODOMETER
• SPEEDO
TEXT SIZE
Press SELECT to change the display text size:
• NORMAL
• LARGE
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press SELECT to change the display units.
• ENGLISH
• METRIC
LANGUAGE
Displays the current language selected.
Press SELECT to change the display language.
• ENGLISH
• ESPANOL
• FRANCAIS
COMPASS
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
21
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
4
1
15
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
3. Start the engine.
14
13
4. Press SETUP to reach the
Compass/Odometer function.
5
12
5. Press SELECT to show COMPASS
ZONE <XX> PRESS SELECT TO
CHANGE.
6
7 8 91011
6. Press the SELECT control
repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is
displayed on the message center. The range of zone values are from 01
to 15 and “wraps” back to 01.
7. To exit the zone setting mode, and to “lock in” your change, press and
release the SETUP control.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
8. Press the SELECT control to start the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until
the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE COMPASS display changes to
COMPASS CALIBRATION COMPLETED. It will take up to five circles to
complete calibration.
22
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
10. The compass is now calibrated.
OIL LIFE START VALUE PRESS SELECT TO CHANGE
Press SELECT to change the oil life start value. OIL LIFE START VALUE
SET TO XXX% will be displayed.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or six months), perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the RESET control for two seconds and release. Oil life
is set to 100% and “OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET IF NEW OIL” is
displayed.
2. Press and hold the RESET control for three seconds and release. Oil
life is set to 100% and “OIL LIFE START VALUE SET TO XXX%” is
displayed.
PARK AID (Reverse sensing system–if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
1. Before you disable/enable the reverse sensing system feature, put the
vehicle in R (Reverse).
2. Press RESET to turn the park aid ON or OFF.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They cannot be reset until the condition is corrected.
• They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition off-on cycle has been
completed.
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
23
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
DOOR AJAR — Displayed when a door is not completely closed.
POWERTRAIN MALFUNCTION — Displayed when the powertrain is
not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE — Displayed when the engine
coolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn
off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
CHECK FUEL CAP — Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not
properly installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer
to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK AIR SUSPENSION — Displayed when the air suspension
system is not operating properly. If this message is displayed while
driving, pull off the road as soon as safely possible. For more
information, refer to Air suspension system in the Driving chapter.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition. Warning message can be reset by pressing the RESET button,
but will return after 10 minutes. If any other button is pressed besides
RESET, the message ’’PRESS RESET TO CLEAR’’ will appear in the
message center. Once this message disappears (after approximately two
seconds), press RESET to clear the warning.
TRUNK AJAR — Displayed when the trunk is not completely closed.
OVERDRIVE OFF — Displayed when the overdrive is disabled.
OVERDRIVE ON — Displayed when the overdrive is enabled.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
24
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use (Note: this includes
the use of the optional full-sized matching spare tire and wheel). For
more information on how the system operates under these conditions,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK COMPASS MOD — Displayed when the compass is not
operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the washer fluid reservoir
is less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 10% or less.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
25
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Premium AM/FM Stereo Single CD/Cassette system
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches, radio and moon roof (if equipped)
may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until
any door is opened.
1. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side
up. With the ignition on, the radio
will begin to play a CD once
inserted. If the ignition and audio system are off, press CD prior to
inserting a disc. Do not force a disc into the system as damage could
result.
26
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
2. CD eject: Press to eject a CD. If
the disc is not removed within the
allotted time, the system will
automatically reload the CD and begin play. Note: The eject function will
work when the ignition and audio systems are turned off.
3. BASS: Press BASS; then
BASS
press
SEL-TEXT
to
SEL-TEXT
+
+
+
+
TREB
decrease/increase the level of bass
output.
TREB (Treble): Press TREB; then
press
decrease/increase the level of treble
output.
BASS
TREB
SEL-TEXT
to
SEL-TEXT
4. BAL (Balance): Press BAL; then
press
sound to the left/right speakers.
BAL
SEL-TEXT
to shift
SEL-TEXT
FADE
FADE: Press FADE; then press
SEL-TEXT
rear/front speakers.
BAL
SEL-TEXT
to shift sound to the
FADE
5. Phone/mute: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to return
to the playing media, or turn the
volume control to adjust the volume.
6. SEL/TEXT: Use with Bass,
Treble, Balance, Fade and other
menu functions.
TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
radio is equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer. Detailed
satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Check
with your authorized dealer for availability.
7. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to access RBDS on/off. Use SEL to
turn RBDS ON or OFF. Press MENU
again to access Program type mode or Show Type/Name mode. (MENU
must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceed to the next RBDS mode.)
27
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RBDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RBDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RBDS-equipped stations for
a certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
With RBDS ON, press MENU until the program type menu is displayed.
One of the various program types will appear. Press
SEL-TEXT
to scroll through music types. Press SEEK or SCAN to search for a
station playing the requested music category.
Show TYPE: Selects between displaying the station’s call letters or
music format when RBDS is enabled. Press MENU until SHOW XX
appears in the display. Press
TYPE.
SEL-TEXT
to select NAME or
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU repeatedly until
COMP (compression) is displayed. Press
the compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed.
Press SEL-TEXT again to disable the feature when COMPRESS
SEL-TEXT
to enable
ON is displayed. When activated, the compression icon will appear in the
display.
Occupancy mode: (if equipped): Press MENU repeatedly until
occupancy mode appears in the display. Press
SEL-TEXT
to
select ALL, DRIVER or REAR SEAT occupancy mode.
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Press
MENU repeatedly until AUTOSET appears in the display.
Press
SEL-TEXT
to turn ON or OFF. When the six strongest
stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If
there are less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one
in the remaining presets.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically and
slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3. SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Press MENU to access and
SEL-TEXT
to adjust the volume
setting. The level will appear in the display.
28
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Dolby: Works in tape mode to reduces tape noise and hiss. Press MENU
until DOLBY XX appears in the display. Press SEL/TEXT to turn ON or
OFF.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Armrest (if equipped): If your vehicle is equipped with Rear Seat
Audio controls, this feature will be listed in Menu mode.
Press
SEL-TEXT
to turn ON or OFF. When the feature is turned
ON, rear seat passengers can adjust the settings of the front audio stem.
For further information, refer to Rear Console Audio Controls (if
equipped) later in this chapter.
Note: The menu selections will remain in the display for approximately
10 seconds, at which time the display will return to the previous mode.
You may also exit the menu options by pressing any other audio control.
Setting the clock: Your vehicle is equipped with a separate in-dash
clock. Refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on
how to set the time.
8. Cassette: Insert a cassette facing to the right.
9. TUNE: Press to manually go up
or down the radio frequency.
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your
vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
10. Side 1–2: Press to access the
next side of the cassette tape. The
display will indicate whether TAPE
1 or TAPE 2 is playing.
11. SEEK: Press to access the
next/previous radio station, tape
selection or CD track. Press and
hold to advance/reverse in the current CD track.
29
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
12. REW (Rewind): Press to
rewind in tape or CD mode.
FF
4
R3EW
FF (Fast forward): Press to fast
forward in tape or CD mode.
13. SCAN: Press SCAN to hear a
brief sampling of radio stations,
selections or CD tracks. Press again
to stop.
14. SHUF (Shuffle): Press to play
the tracks on the current CD in
random order. Press again to stop.
15. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band, tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
16. AM/FM: Press to switch
between AM/FM1/FM2 modes.
17. Tape eject: Press to eject the
tape.
18. CD/TAPE: Press to switch
between CD and TAPE mode. In
radio mode, the CD icon will appear
in the display if a CD is loaded into the system.
19. SAT: Your system may be
equipped with Satellite Ready
capability. The kit to enable the
Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer. Detailed
satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
20. On/Off/Volume: Press to turn
on and off; turn to adjust the
volume levels.
30
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Premium plus AM/FM Stereo In-dash Six CD sound system
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the window switches and radio may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition is turned off or until any door is opened.
1. CD slot: To insert a CD, press
LOAD. Wait to insert a CD until the
system prompts you. With the
ignition on, the radio will begin to play a CD once inserted. If the ignition
and audio system are off, press CD prior to inserting a disc. Do not force
a disc into the system as damage could result.
31
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
2. SEEK: Press to access the
next/previous radio station or CD
track. Press and hold to
advance/reverse in the current CD track.
3. TUNE/CAT: Press to manually go
up or down the radio frequency.
CAT is only available when equipped
with Satellite radio. Your vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready
capability. The kit to enable Satellite reception is available through your
authorized dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions are included with the
dealer installed kit. Check with your authorized dealer for
availability.
4. MUTE: Press to mute the playing
media. Press again to return to the
playing media or turn the volume
control to adjust the volume.
5. Eject: Press to eject CD(s) when
the ignition is on or off. Numbers
will illuminate in the display
indicating which CD slots are loaded with CDs. To eject a specific CD,
press eject and the corresponding preset number. If no preset is
selected, the system will eject the currently selected CD. Press and hold
to eject all loaded discs.
Note: If the CD is not removed within approximately 15 seconds, the
system will reload the disc and begin play if the system is on.
6. BASS: Press BASS; then
BASS
press
SEL-TEXT
to
SEL-TEXT
SEL-TEXT
SEL-TEXT
+
+
+
TREB
decrease/increase the level of bass
output.
TREB (Treble): Press TREB; then
press
decrease/increase the level of treble
output.
BASS
TREB
SEL-TEXT
to
7. BAL (Balance): Press BAL; then
press
sound to the left/right speakers.
BAL
SEL-TEXT
to shift
FADE
32
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
FADE: Press FADE; then
press SEL-TEXT to shift
sound to the rear/front speakers.
BAL
SEL-TEXT
+
FADE
8. SEL-TEXT: Use with Bass,
Treble, Balance, Fade and other
menu functions.
TEXT: TEXT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Check
with your authorized dealer for availability.
9. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to access RBDS ON or OFF.
Use
SEL-TEXT
to turn
RBDS ON or OFF. Press MENU again to access Program type mode or
Show Type mode. (MENU must be pressed within 10 seconds to proceed
to the next RBDS mode.)
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RBDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RBDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RBDS-equipped stations for
a certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
In FM mode, with RBDS ON, press MENU until the program type menu
is displayed. One of the various program types will appear.
Press
SEL-TEXT
to scroll through music types. Press SEEK or
SCAN to search for a station playing the requested music category.
Show TYPE: Selects between displaying the station’s call letters or
music format when RBDS is enabled. Press and hold MENU until SHOW
XX appears in the display. Press
TYPE.
SEL-TEXT
to select NAME or
Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU until
compression status is displayed. Press
SEL-TEXT
to enable the
compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed.
33
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Press
SEL-TEXT
again to disable the feature when COMPRESS
ON is displayed. When activated, the compression icon will illuminate in
the display.
Occupancy mode: (Available on Premium plus audios): Press MENU
until occupancy mode appears in the display. Press
select ALL, DRIVER or REAR SEAT occupancy mode.
SEL-TEXT
to
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Press
MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL-TEXT
to turn ON or OFF. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.
When activated, AUTOSET will appear in the display when any of the
preset controls are pressed.
Speed sensitive volume: Radio volume changes automatically and
slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3. Level 0 turns the feature off and level 7 is
the maximum setting.
Press MENU to access and use
setting. The level will appear in the display.
Armrest ON/OFF: Press MENU repeatedly until Armrest ON/OFF
appears. Use SEL-TEXT to toggle the rear console audio controls
ON or OFF (if equipped).
SEL-TEXT
to adjust the volume
Setting the clock: Your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash clock. Refer
to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to set
the time.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band, tune
to a station, press and hold a preset
button until sound returns.
11. On/Off/Volume: Push to turn
on/off; turn to adjust the volume
levels.
Note: With the ignition and audio
system off, you may press the
volume control to momentarily view the clock.
34
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
12. LOAD: Press to load a CD.
When the system prompts you,
select a preset to load a CD in that
particular slot. Load the CD. If you do not pick a slot, the system will
select the next available slot. Available slots are indicated by small
flashing indicators in the display. Press and hold to autoload up to six
discs.
Note: Ensure that the system is ready to accept the CD and do not try
to force the disc into the CD slot as damage could result.
13. AM/FM: Press repeatedly to
switch between AM/FM1/FM2 mode.
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode.
Press CD and a preset to select a
specific CD to play.
15. SAT: SAT is only available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your
vehicle may be equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable
Satellite reception is available through your authorized dealer. Detailed
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Check
with your authorized dealer for availability.
16. SHUF/SCAN: Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of radio stations
or CD tracks. Press again to stop.
SHUF (Shuffle): Press and hold to play the CD tracks in random order
for the CD currently being played. Press again to stop.
Rear console audio controls (if equipped)
• NEXT: Press to access the next
radio memory preset, the next
CD track or the next tape
selection.
• VOL: Press the up arrow to
increase the volume or the down
arrow to decrease the volume.
• MODE: Press to cycle through
AM, FM1, FM2, TAPE or CD (if
equipped) modes.
35
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies: AM and FM frequencies are established by the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors: There are three factors that can affect radio
reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from a station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
Cassette player care:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
36
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
CD/CD player care:
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Dirty, warped or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Audio system warranty and service: Refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty
information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified
technician.
37
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
DUAL ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(DEATC) SYSTEM
1. A/C control: Cools the vehicle
A/C
and is used to reduce humidity in
the vehicle. Press to turn on/off.
The A/C control engages automatically in AUTO,
and
modes.
2. Recirculation control: Cools
the vehicle more quickly by
recirculating the cabin air instead of
using outside air and helps prevent unpleasant outside odors or fumes
from entering the vehicle. Press to turn on/off in all modes except
Recirculation may turn off automatically to reduce fogging potential.
.
3. Passenger side temperature
control: Controls the temperature
on the passenger side of the vehicle
when in dual zone mode. To enter
dual zone, press the passenger temperature control or DUAL. The
passenger temperature will appear in the display.
4. Rear defroster control:
Removes ice and fog from the rear
R
window. Press to turn on/off. Refer
to the rear window defrost section
for more information.
38
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
5. DUAL (Single/dual temperature
control): Allows the driver to have
full control of the cabin temperature
DUAL
settings (single zone) or allows the passenger to have control of their
individual temperature settings (dual zone). Press to turn on dual zone
mode, press again to return to single zone.
6.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and the
side window demisters.
7.
: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, the side
window demisters and floor vents.
8.
: Distributes air through the floor vents.
9.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor
vents.
10.
: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Manual override controls: Allows
you to manually determine where
airflow is directed. To return to fully
automatic control, press AUTO.
OFF
11. OFF: Outside air is shut out and
the fan will not operate.
OFF
12. AUTO: Press and select the
desired temperature. The system
will automatically determine the fan
AUTO
speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, outside or recirculated air to heat
or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature. If unusual conditions
exist, (i.e., window fogging, etc.), manual overrides allow you to select
airflow locations and fan speed.
13. Driver’s side temperature
control: Controls the temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle.
14. Fan Speed: Used to manually
enable or disable the fan speed. To
return to automatic fan operation,
press AUTO.
39
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
15. EXT: Displays the outside air
temperature. It will remain
displayed until the EXT control is
pressed again. The external
temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle has been moving for
a period of time.
16. Temperature conversion:
Press to switch between Fahrenheit
and Celsius temperature on the
DEATC display only. The set point
temperatures in Celsius will be displayed in half-degree increments.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
recirculation control on or the system turned off.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C position, reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the PARK gear position to
continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
40
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
REAR CONSOLE CLIMATE CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
• TEMP: Press to increase or
decrease airflow temperature.
• FAN: Press to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located
on the instrument panel.
R
Press the rear defroster control to
clear the rear window of thin ice
and fog. A small LED will illuminate
when the rear defroster is activated.
The ignition must be in the on position to operate the rear window
defroster.
The defroster turns off automatically after a predetermined amount of
time or when the ignition is turned off. To manually turn off the
defroster, press the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
41
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking
lamps, instrument panel lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a preselected period of
time after the ignition switch is
turned to off.
The autolamps are turned on at
night or when the front wipers are
turned on.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise. The
preselected time lapse is adjustable up to approximately three
minutes. See the programming procedure following.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to the off position
(O).
The amount of time the autolamps stay on can be programed by doing
the following:
1. Turn the ignition to off.
2. Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position.
Note: Steps 3 through 5 need to be performed within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the headlamp switch to off.
4. Turn the ignition to on and then back to off.
5. Turn the headlamp switch to the autolamp position.
• At this point, the exterior lamps turn on.
42
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
6. Wait the desired amount of time for delay, then turn the headlamp
switch to off.
• At this point, the exterior lamps turn off and the time delay is set.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
The daytime running light system turns the headlamps on, with a
reduced light output, when:
• the ignition is on,
• the transmission is not in P (Park),
• the headlamp system is not turned on by another feature such as
using the headlamp control or Autolamp.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Light
(DRL) System does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
43
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel during headlight
and parking lamp operation.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from left
to right to brighten the
instrument panel.
• Rotate the thumbwheel from right
to left to dim the instrument
panel.
During full daylight, the instrument panel will still be visible with the
headlamps operating.
Dome lamp control
The panel dimmer control also controls the dome lamp operation.
• Rotate the thumbwheel fully to the right, past detent to activate the
dome lamp and all interior lamps.
• In order to turn off these lamps, rotate the thumbwheel to the left.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away. Check your headlamp
alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp
beam pattern.
44
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp bulb center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe an area of high intensity
light. The top of the high intensity
area should touch the horizontal
reference line, if not, the beam will
need to be adjusted.
To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block
the light from one headlamp while
adjusting the other.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a 4 mm
wrench, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
45
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Map/courtesy lamps
To turn on the map lamps, press the
map lamp control.
Rear courtesy/reading lamps
The courtesy lamp lights when:
• the rocker control is pressed.
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
46
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the following chart. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function
Trade Number
9005
H7
3457 AK
168
Headlamp (Hi beam)
Headlamp (Low beam)*
Park and turn lamp (front)
Sidemarker (front)
Backup lamp
Stop, tail, turn and sidemarker lamp (rear)
Cornering lamp
3156 K
3157 K
3156 K
168
License plate lamp
High-mount brakelamp - Stop**
Luggage compartment lamp
Map lamp
LED assembly
212-2
578
Visor vanity lamp - Slide on Rail system
(SOR)
A6224PF
47
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Function
Trade Number
Rear grab handle reading lamps
Door courtesy lamp
Glove compartment
578
904
194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* For vehicles with HID lamps, see your authorized dealer for service.
** When replacing the center high mount stop lamp assembly, see your
authorized dealer for service.
Replacing interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Rear courtesy/reading lamps
To replace the rear courtesy/reading lamp bulbs in the rear assist handle:
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Under the handle, remove two
trim screw covers, retaining screws,
lamp assembly and assist handle
from the headliner.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the two screws on the
lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out.
To complete installation, follow the
removal procedure in reverse order.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
48
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing headlamp bulbs
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the three retainers on top of the radiator cover and the two
retainers in front of the radiator cover.
3. Remove the three bolts for each headlamp.
4. Press the retainer next to the vertical aim adjuster, then pull the
headlamp assembly forward and disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Remove the five screws and the protective bulb cover from the
headlamp assembly.
Low beam
• Disconnect the electrical
connector and remove the
retainer and headlamp bulb from
the headlamp assembly.
High beam
• Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it
straight out.
• Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb.
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
6. To complete installation, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Note: To ensure a good seal, attach the bulb cover and partially tighten
the screws. Check to ensure the gasket is fully centered. Finish
tightening the screws in a criss-cross pattern (upper-left, lower right
etc.)
49
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing HID low beam headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge”
source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned
out, the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your
authorized dealer.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
The front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs are located in the
headlamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace these bulbs.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the retainers and the radiator cover.
3. Remove the bolts, then pull the headlamp assembly forward and
disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of
the socket and push in the new bulb
until it snaps, locking it into
position.
6. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Replacing tail lamp/brake/turn lamp bulbs
The tail lamp, the brake lamp and the turn signal lamp bulbs are located
in the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace these bulbs.
50
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position, then open the
trunk and remove the retainer.
2. Carefully pull the carpet away to
expose the lamp assembly hardware.
3. Remove the three nut and washer
assemblies, then pull the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Remove the bulb socket by
rotating it counterclockwise, then
pull it out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket and
push in the new bulb.
6. To complete installation, follow
the removal procedure in reverse
order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position, then remove two
screws, grommets and the license
plate lamp assembly from the trunk
lid.
2. Carefully pull the bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
3. Install the lamp assembly on the
trunk lid with two grommets,
ensuring the grommets are pushed
all the way in to the trunk lid and secure with two screws.
51
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position, then open the
trunk and carefully pull the trunk lid
liner away to expose the lamp
assembly.
2. Remove bulb socket from the
trunk lid by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in trunk lid by turning clockwise.
Replacing high-mount brakelamp assembly
To change the high-mount
brakelamp assembly:
1. Remove the high-mount
brakelamp assembly from the
headliner by pulling downward on
the assembly.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector and remove the assembly.
3. Install the new assembly by aligning the tabs and pushing upward until
it snaps in place.
52
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to five seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper/washer features
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
53
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
Slide on rod feature
(if equipped)
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
54
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
CLOCK
Press the right control to move the
time display forward.
Press the left control to move the
time display backward.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
The auxiliary power point is located under the instrument panel.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
55
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
REAR CENTER CONSOLE FEATURES (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear center console incorporates the following features:
• Utility compartment
• Auxiliary power point (if equipped)
• Remote radio/climate controls (if equipped)
• Remote seat adjustment (if equipped)
Remote seat adjustment
The rear passenger can move the
front passenger seat forward or
backward using the control located
in the rear center console.
With the ignition is in the accessory
position, move the control forward
or backward to move front
passenger seat.
Remote seat adjustment lockout
The window lockout control, located
on the drivers door, will also lockout
the remote seat adjustment. To lock
out the remote seat adjustment
feature, press the right side of the
control. Press the left side to
restore the remote seat adjustment
control.
Rear console radio/climate controls (if equipped)
Refer to the Entertainment Systems and Climate Controls chapters for
operation instructions.
Rear radio/climate controls lockout
The rear radio/climate control feature can be locked out by pressing the
3 and the 5 buttons on the radio simultaneously while the radio is on. To
enable the rear radio/climate controls, press the 3 and the 5 buttons
again.
56
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
One-touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
57
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the power window switches and radio may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off or until any
door is opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror and a
driver’s side exterior mirror that have an auto-dimming function. The
electronic day/night mirrors will change from the normal (high reflective)
state to the non-glare (darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach
the interior mirror. When the interior mirror detects bright light from
behind the vehicle, the interior rear view mirror and the driver’s side
exterior mirror (if equipped) will automatically adjust (darken) to
minimize glare.
The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
58
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory
set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality
features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s door.
Refer to Memory seats/outside rear view mirrors/adjustable pedals in
the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
Auto-dimming feature (if equipped)
For the auto-dimming feature on the driver’s side view mirror, refer to
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in this chapter.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped
with the auto dimming feature, the
mirror glass is thicker and will take
longer to defrost.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
59
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the bottom of the control to
adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
60
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The
light will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Press the brake pedal
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
61
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press the RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET +
control to operate the tap-up
function. Press and release this
control to increase the vehicle set
speed in small amounts by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the SET - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
You can also use the SET -
control to operate the tap-down
function. Press and release this
control to decrease the vehicle
set speed in small amounts by
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
62
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• Press the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET + control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Press the brake pedal. This will
not erase your vehicle’s
previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn the speed
control or the ignition off, your
speed control set speed memory is
erased.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
Audio control features
In radio mode:
• Press NEXT to select the next
preset station within the current
radio band.
In tape mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
selection on the tape.
In CD mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
track on the disc.
63
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or - to adjust the
volume.
Climate control features (if equipped)
• Press TEMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure your
transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure.
HomeLink
64
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Car2U Home Automation
System
HomeLinkா Wireless Control System (if equipped)
The HomeLink Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
WARNING: When programming your HomeLink Wireless
Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and
objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
65
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Programming
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
accessory position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink.
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
66
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the Programming section, replace
Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note Step 2 in the
Programming section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section.
Operating the HomeLinkா Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
67
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Erasing HomeLinkா buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming
section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
Car2Uா Home Automation System (if equipped)
The Car2U Home Automation
System is a universal transmitter
located in the driver’s visor that
includes two primary features – a
garage door opener and a platform
for remote activation of devices
within the home. The Car2U
system’s garage door opener
function replaces the common
hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the interior of your vehicle. After being programmed for
garage doors, the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to
operate security devices and home lighting systems.
68
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: Make sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are programming. Do not
program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before
April 1, 1982).
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the
programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security
reasons. Refer to Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System
buttons later in this section.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the
Car2U system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist you in programming the transmitter.
Additional Car2U system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free Car2U system help line at
1-866-572-2728.
Types of garage door openers (rolling code and fixed code)
The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate
rolling code and fixed code garage door openers.
• Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every
time your remote control garage door opener is used.
• Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996. Fixed
code uses the same coded signal every time. It is manually
programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code.
69
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
If you do not know if your garage
door opener is a rolling code or
fixed code device, open your garage
door opener’s remote control battery
cover. If a panel of DIP switches is
present your garage door opener is
a fixed code device. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code
device.
O
N
1
2
4
5
9
11
12
10
3
6
7
8
CTS 206-12
T124
Rolling code programming
Note: Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions. Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so
you will know which actions are time-sensitive. If you do not follow the
time-sensitive actions, the device will time out and you will have to
repeat the procedure.
Note: Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. Firmly press the two outer
Car2U system buttons for
1–2 seconds, then release.
70
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Go to the garage to locate the
garage door opener motor and its
“learn” button. You may need a
ladder to reach the unit and you
may need to remove the unit’s cover
or light lens to locate the “learn”
button. Press the “learn” button,
after which you will have
10–30 seconds to return to your
vehicle and complete the following
steps. If you cannot locate the
“learn” button, refer to the Owner’s Guide of your garage door opener or
call the toll-free Car2U system help line at 1-866-57Car2U
(1-866-572-2728).
3. Return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the Car2U system button you
would like to use to control the
garage door. You may need to hold
the button from 5–20 seconds,
during which time the selected
button indicator light will blink
slowly. Immediately (within
1 second) release the button once the garage door moves. When the
button is released, the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
4. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps in this section.
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door
opener, a security device or home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 4
substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for
the garage door opener. For example, you could assign the left-most
button to the garage door, the center button to a security device, and
the right-most button to another garage door opener.
71
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Note: The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed. If
you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it is necessary to erase the current settings using
the Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons procedure
and then programming all of the devices being used.
Fixed code programming
Note: Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. To program units with fixed code DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter, paper and a pen or pencil.
2. Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to
right for all 8 to 12 switches. Use the figure below:
When a switch is in the up, on, or + position, circle “L.”
When a switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, circle “M.”
When a switch is in the down, off, or – position, circle “R.”
Switch position
Up, on or +
Middle, neutral or 0
Down, off or –
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
8
L
M
R
9
L
M
R
10 11 12
L
M
R
L
M
R
L
M
R
M M M M M M M
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
L=left; M=middle; R=right
72
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. To input these positions into the
Car2U system, simultaneously
press all three Car2U system
buttons for a few seconds and then
release to put the device into
programming mode. The indicator
lights will blink slowly. Within
2.5 minutes enter your
corresponding DIP switch settings
from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the
buttons corresponding to the settings you circled.
4. After inputting switch settings, simultaneously press and release all
three Car2U system buttons. The indicator lights will turn on.
5. Press and hold the Car2U
system button you would like to use
to control the garage door.
Immediately (within 1 second)
release the button once the garage
door moves. During this time the
selected button indicator light will
blink slowly. Do not release the
button until you see the garage door move. Most garage doors open
quickly. You may need to hold the button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage door.
6. The indicator light will (begin to) blink rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door opener does not operate following these
steps, repeat Steps 2 through 6. Otherwise, call the toll-free Car2U help
line at 1-866-57Car2U (1-866-572-2728).
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Car2Uா Home Automation System buttons
Note: The system allows for three devices to be programmed. If you
need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it will be necessary to erase the current settings
using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices
being used.
73
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To erase programming on the Car2U system (individual buttons cannot
be erased), use the following procedure:
1. Firmly press the two outside
Car2U system buttons
simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
begin to blink rapidly. The indicator
lights are located directly above the
buttons.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release your fingers from the
buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system, it is
recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes and modifications to the Car2U system transmitter by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the
equipment.
POWER TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power trunk controlled by the
interior trunk control, the key fob or the keypad on the door.
If anything obstructs the power trunk while it is closing, the trunk will
automatically reverse to the open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance. Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing
trunk, or stronger. The force of the closing trunk increases as the trunk
approaches the latched position. The trunk will close with the next press
of the interior trunk control or key fob button.
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the luggage
compartment area before using the power trunk control.
74
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is installed,
the power trunk needs to be reset. To reset the power trunk:
• Reconnect the battery with the trunk closed
• Power activate the trunk with the power interior trunk release, the
key fob or the keypad on the door to the full open position, then
power activate the same power source and fully close the trunk. The
power trunk is now reset.
INTERIOR TRUNK CONTROL
The remote trunk release control is
located on the driver’s door trim
panel and can be operated at any
time except when your perimeter
alarm system is armed.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
power trunk, press the button once
to open the trunk, press it again to
close.
You can render the switch inoperable by locking the button with your
master key.
The remote trunk release control and power door locks will be disabled
when the vehicle perimeter alarm system is armed. This control will not
work until the vehicle perimeter alarm system is disarmed. Refer to
Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and Security chapter.
75
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
FUEL DOOR RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a
locking fuel door. To open the door,
press the control located on the
door.
Fuel filler door override release
If the remote release is inoperative,
open the trunk, then pull the
override release handle located
inside the trunk to open the fuel
filler door.
76
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with a master key and a valet (identified with
the word VALET) key lock system.
• The master key will access the vehicle’s doors, trunk, glove box,
ignition and remote trunk release.
• The valet key will access doors and ignition only.
Before using the valet key with an attendant, lock the interior trunk
control to disable the interior trunk control located on the drivers door,
then lock the glove compartment with your master key. Do not hand
over the remote entry transmitter or the master key to the valet
attendant. For more information, refer to Interior trunk control in the
Driver Controls chapter.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
control to unlock all
doors.
• Press the
control to lock all
doors.
Power door trim switch inhibit
This feature disables the power door locks and trunk interior release
switches if all doors are closed and the perimeter alarm becomes armed.
Once the power door trim switches are disabled, they can only become
active when perimeter alarm is disarmed.
Smart locks
With the key in the ignition, in any switch position, and either the
driver’s or passenger’s door open, the doors cannot be locked using the
power door lock switches.
Central locking/unlocking
• All doors are locked when the key is inserted into the driver door key
cylinder and turned to the lock position.
• The driver’s door is unlocked when the key is inserted into the driver
door key cylinder and turned to the unlock position.
• If the key is turned a second time to the unlock position within five
seconds, all vehicle doors will unlock.
77
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Autolock
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following
conditions are met:
• all the doors are closed,
• the engine is running,
• you shift into gear, putting the vehicle in motion, and.
• the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Autorelock
The autolock feature repeats when:
• a door is opened and closed while the engine is running,
• you shift into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Autounlock
The auto-unlock feature will unlock all doors when:
• the ignition has been in the on position, all doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h),
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
accessory or off position, and
• the driver door is opened (within ten minutes after the ignition was
transitioned to the accessory or off position).
Note: The vehicle doors will not auto-unlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked prior to the driver door being opened.
Deactivating/activating the autolock or autounlock feature
Autolocking and autounlocking are independent features; either feature
may be enabled or disabled without affecting the other.
You must complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait at least 30 seconds. Note: Before following the procedure, make
sure that the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors, the
hood, and the decklid are closed.
78
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
1. Turn the ignition to the on
position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on to
the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position.
6. The door locks will lock/unlock to confirm programming mode is
entered/active.
7. With the ignition still in the on position, for the autolock feature,
press the unlock control once then press the lock control once. The horn
will chirp once to confirm successful programming. For the autounlock
feature, press the lock control once, then press the unlock control once.
The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice (one
short and one long chirp) if autounlock was activated.
If any door, the hood, or the deck lid is open, the horn will chirp twice,
and the procedure will need to be performed again.
8. After having waited the necessary time for the programming to
confirm, turn the ignition to the off position.
Once disabled, the autolock autounlock feature can be enabled by
repeating the procedure in Steps 1–8.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage childproof locks.
79
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in
the event they become locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
To open the luggage compartment
door (lid) from within the luggage
compartment, pull the illuminated
“T” shaped handle and push up on
the trunk lid. The handle is
composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
The “T” shaped handle will be
located either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or inside
the luggage compartment near the
tail lamps.
WARNING: Keep vehicle
doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep
keys and remote transmitters out
of a child’s reach. Unsupervised
children could lock themselves in
the trunk and risk injury. Children
should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
80
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Radio type approval numbers for remote entry receiver
If the type approval of your remote entry system is inspected in one of
the countries listed in the following table, refer to the corresponding
approval number:
Remote entry receiver certification numbers
Gabon
Jordan
Zambia
01070305/ARTEL/GABTEL
CAZ/ENG/CA/04/11/1
TRC/LPD/2004/28
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
81
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The remote entry system allows you
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
without a key. Note: The remote
entry features operate with the
ignition in any position except in the
on position, when the transmission
is in any gear other than P (Park)
or N (Neutral).
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take ALL remote entry
transmitters with you to the authorized dealer in order to aid in
troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within five seconds to unlock all the doors.
Security lighting
Your vehicle’s headlamps and park lamps will illuminate if:
• it is dark outside (evening),
• the headlamp control is in the autolamp position, and
• the unlock control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter.
The headlamps and parklamps remain illuminated:
• for 25 seconds, or
• until you turn the ignition from the off position, or
• until the vehicle doors are locked using the remote entry transmitter
or the power door unlock control.
Locking the doors
Press
and release to lock all the doors. Note: The interior lamps will
turn off and the parklamps will flash, if all the closures (doors, trunk,
hood) are closed. If any closure is not closed, the parklamps will not
flash.
82
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Press
and release again within five seconds to confirm that all the
doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
once and the parklamps will flash, if all the closures are closed. If any
closure is not closed, the horn will chirp twice and the parklamps will
not flash.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the
parklamps/tail lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be
used to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Opening the trunk
Press
once to open the trunk.
If your vehicle is fitted with the optional power decklid, press
to open the trunk and twice to close it.
twice
WARNING: Before operating the power decklid, be sure that no
one, particularly a child, is in a position where he or she can be
injured by the trunk lid. NEVER leave the remote entry transmitter
where it can be inadvertently activated, as someone could be seriously
injured by a moving decklid.
• Ensure that the trunk is closed and latched before driving your
vehicle. Failure to properly latch the trunk may cause objects to fall
out or block the driver’s rear view.
The remote entry system allows you to open the trunk while the ignition
is in any position. However, if the ignition is in the on position and the
gearshift is in D (Drive), the trunk will only open if the vehicle is moving
3 mph (5 km/h) or slower.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
on the remote transmitter to activate the alarm. Note: The
panic alarm only works with the ignition in the off position.
Press a second time to deactivate the alarm. You may also deactivate
the alarm in the following ways:
• Turn the ignition to the on or start positions.
• Wait two minutes and 45 seconds for the alarm to time-out.
83
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature (if equipped)
The remote keyless entry system can also control the memory
seats/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature. With this feature, the first two
programmed transmitters will recall a different memory position.
Press
once to unlock the driver’s door and move the memory
features to the corresponding memory position, just as if you had
pressed the memory control in the vehicle.
Activating the memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, mirrors and
SET
adjustable pedals to the position
desired.
2
1
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within five seconds, press one control on the remote transmitter and
then press the 1 or 2 button on the driver’s door panel to which you
would like to associate with the memory positions and Driver 1 or Driver
2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter, if desired.
Deactivating the memory seat/mirrors/adjustable pedals feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the
SET
driver’s door panel.
2. Within five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate
2
1
and then press the SET control on the driver’s door panel .
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter, if desired.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
84
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct
orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the
battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure. Note: Do not depress the
brake pedal at any time during this procedure. If the brake pedal is
pressed at any time during this procedure, programming mode will be
exited and the entire procedure must be repeated.
85
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not
pressed during this sequence.
3
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
2
4
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
1
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the 1 (off)
position and the 3 (on) position. Note: The eighth turn must end in the
3 (on) position.
4. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
5. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
6. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
7. Repeat Step 5 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
8. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After
20 seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.
9. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on or the accessory position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dimmer panel control must not be set to the off position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
86
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
last door is closed, or after 10 minutes if the last door is left open.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
0
9
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• open the trunk.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create your own
5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Enter a sixth digit to indicate which personality feature should be
recalled by the personal code.
• 1 • 2 recalls driver personality 1.
• 3 • 4 recalls driver personality 2.
• 5 • 6, 7 • 8 and 9 • 0 do not recall a driver personality.
All of the vehicle doors will lock and unlock to confirm programming of
the new code. Each driver personality profile (personality 1 or
personality 2) can be associated with only one personal code. The
factory-set code cannot be associated with a personality code.
You can program up to three personal codes to unlock your vehicle.
These codes do not replace the permanent code that was provided by
your authorized dealer.
87
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Tips for setting codes:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
Erasing personal codes
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code. The keyless entry keypad and
interior lights will illuminate and the driver’s door will unlock.
2. Press and release the 1 • 2 within five seconds of completing Step 1.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds to erase the customer
programmed codes. All of the vehicle doors will lock and then unlock to
confirm erasure.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Note: To exit programming mode, either wait 5 seconds after pressing 1
• 2 on the keypad, or press the 7 • 8 and 9 • 0 pads simultaneously to
lock all vehicle doors and end programming mode.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. Note: The driver’s door will unlock and the interior lamps will
illuminate after the factory set 5-digit code or your personal code are
correctly entered.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off. If the driver’s door is ajar, the doors will not lock.
Releasing the trunk with the keyless entry system
To release/open the trunk, enter the factory-set code or personal code
(driver door unlocks) and press 5 • 6 within five seconds.
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional power decklid, pressing 5 •
6 again will close it (you may need to reenter the keypad code again).
WARNING: Before operating the power decklid, be sure that no
one, particularly a child, is in a position where he or she can be
injured by the trunk lid. NEVER leave the remote entry transmitter
where it can be inadvertently activated, as someone could be seriously
injured by a moving decklid.
88
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the on position.
SECURILOCKா PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Radio type approval numbers for Immobilizer System PATS XCVR
If the type approval of your immobilizer system is inspected in one of the
countries listed in the following table, refer to the corresponding
approval number:
Immobilizer System PATS XCVR certification numbers
TX Frequency: 134,2 kHz
Country Name
American Samoa (USA)
Bahrain
-8,1 dBµA/m @ 10 m
Type Approval Number
See USA
DLM/GEN/18/18/16
340/3 Vol.II
Barbados
Canada
China
Ghana
Guam (USA)
Jordan
CANADA: 3043104475A
CMII ID:2005DJ0428
SPLS / -485 / 2001
See USA
4/U/U/4250
Kenya
CCK/ES/100/0
89
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Immobilizer System PATS XCVR certification numbers
Kuwait
Mauritius
M.C/U.S.0 /5/7-12579
TA/2005/15
Mayotte (F)
Mexico
RLVVIVP03-324
Morocco
MR 1299 ANRT 2004
Netherlands Antilles (NL)
Nicaragua
Northern Mariana Islands
Oman
NCG-CE-04-004
See USA
OMA/1265(A) 1308/2001
See USA
QTEL/SR/2003/R-276
(10/1900)
Puerto Rico
Qatar
Saudi Arabia
South Korea
Tunisia
R-LPD1-04-0145
269/MAT/2004
United Arabian Emirates
Uruguay
5/10-2/3274/3774
025/FR/2003
USA
Zambia
NT8-15607PAT3XCVR
CAZ/ENG/CA/2005/02/8
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Your vehicle comes with three coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
90
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
• When the ignition is in the off position, the indicator will flash once
every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no
electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t
start, try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful
contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator
still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off
position.
The theft indicator will flash every two seconds when the vehicle is
armed.
91
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key
(programmed to your vehicle) disarms the vehicle and allows the
engine to start. The indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate for
three seconds and then go out. If the indicator stays on for an extended
period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your
authorized dealer or a qualified technician.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and
understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Tips:
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
• Only use SecuriLock keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
92
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
1. Insert a previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
3
2. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off)
position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position
for at least one second, but no more
than 10 seconds.
2
4
3. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off)
position, and remove the coded key
from the ignition.
1
4. After three seconds but within ten seconds of removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the other previously programmed coded
key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second but not more
than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 1 (off) position, and remove the second key
from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on) position. Keep
the ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second.
9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start
your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off
rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to
have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure
from Step 1 for each additional key.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
93
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Arming the system
When armed, the perimeter alarm will notify you of an unauthorized
entry. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the park
lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Any
of the following actions will arm the alarm system:
• Press the remote transmitter lock control one time to arm the system.
• Lock all doors using the keypad.
• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or
passenger door is open and then closed.
• Lock all doors with the key in the key lock cylinder.
If all the closures (doors, trunk, hood) are closed, the park lamps will
flash once and the horn will chirp once when the
on the remote
entry transmitter is pressed a second time within five seconds.
If any closure is not properly closed, the park lamps will not flash and
the horn will chirp twice.
The system will wait 20 seconds after one of the above actions is
performed before allowing the alarm to be armed. After the 20–second
pre-arm phase, the interior trim remote trunk release control and the
interior trim power door unlock control are disabled, in order to further
protect your vehicle.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter.
• Unlock the doors using a valid code on the keypad.
• Unlock the doors with the key in the key lock cylinder.
• Turn the ignition to the on position.
94
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Adjustable head restraints
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
Your vehicle’s seats are equipped with head restraints which are
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit
head motion in the event of a rear collision. To properly adjust your head
restraints, lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your
head or as close to that position as possible. Refer to the following to
raise and lower the head restraints.
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push control to lower head restraint.
95
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the manual recline function (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
To adjust the front seatback using
the manual recliner:
• Lift and hold the handle located
on the side of the seat.
• Lean against the seatback to
adjust it to your desired position.
You can recline the seat back or
bring it forward.
• Release the handle when the desired position has been reached.
96
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front seat armrest
The front seat armrest has a locking
pin which prevents the armrest from
folding down during a collision. If
the locking pin has engaged because
of a substantial jolt, but no collision
has occurred, you can disengage the
locking pin by first moving the
armrest forward until it stops to
align the hole with the locking pin,
then by pushing a small tool
through the access hole provided.
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all front
seat armrests should be inspected by an authorized dealer after
any collision to verify that the locking pin feature has not been
damaged. The front seat armrest must be replaced if either damage or
improper operation is found. Failure to replace a damaged front seat
armrest may result in the armrest falling suddenly during a collision,
which could lead to serious injury.
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest, press
the button, on either the driver or
passenger side, to unlatch and open
the lid.
97
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located
on the front inboard side of the
seat.
Press the top side of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the bottom side of the control
to adjust softness.
Adjusting the power front seats
The controls for the power seats are located on the inside of each front
door.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.
98
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not
hang objects off seat back or stow objects in map pocket (if
equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do not place
objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and
the center console (if equipped). Check Passenger Airbag Disable
Indicator for proper airbag status. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) chapter
for additional details. Failure to follow these instructions may interfere
with the front passenger seat sensing system.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or backward.
Press to move the seat forward or
backward.
99
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press to move the front portion of
the seat cushion up or down.
Press to move the rear portion of
the seat cushion up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seat control is located on the driver’s or front passenger’s
door.
100
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the heated seats:
• Press the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Press again to deactivate.
• Press the indicated side of the
control for minimum heat.
• Press again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the ignition is turned to the off position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
Rear heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
101
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels and
operate like the front heated seats. Refer to the Heated Seats section in
this chapter.
Easy-access/easy-out feature (if equipped)
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 in (5 cm)
when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition
The seat will move forward (to the original position) when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the key is placed in the ignition
Seat-mounted cup holders (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholders in the cushion of the
front center seat and the rear seat . The rear seat cupholder is designed
to over rotate from the seat when subjected to a heavy load. The rear
seat cupholder can be reset by rotating to the closed position.
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Memory seats/outside rear view mirrors/adjustable pedals
(if equipped)
This system allows automatic
SET
positioning of the driver seat,
adjustable pedals, and outside rear
view mirrors to two programmable
positions.
2
1
The memory seat control is located on the driver door.
• To program position one, move the driver seat to the desired position
using the seat controls. Press the SET control. The SET control
indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated,
press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in
Park. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
102
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter
(unlock) control.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety Systemா
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of the following items:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensor
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights
How does the Personal Safety Systemா work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints control module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
103
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats
and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants
are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are
much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in
the front.
104
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the front
passenger airbag and passenger seat-mounted side airbag. The system is
designed to help protect small (child size) occupants from frontal airbag
deployments when they are seated or restrained in the front passenger
seat contrary to proper child-seating or restraint usage
recommendations. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY
encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The
sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag when the passenger seat
is empty. The sensor turns off the passenger seat-mounted side airbag
when the seat is empty and the safety belt is unbuckled.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraints (SRS) section of this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions and in side collisions. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient
severity, together with the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
105
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management feature
section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety Systemா is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning light and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not
required.
The Restraints control module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, front
passenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In
addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the
instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or
more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
106
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
107
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Energy management feature
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature is designed to pay out webbing in a
controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Lap belts
Adjusting the front center seat lap belt (if equipped)
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.
108
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The lap belt does not adjust
automatically. Insert the tongue into
the correct buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the tongue is
coming from). To lengthen the belt,
turn the tongue at a right angle to
the belt and pull across your lap
until it reaches the buckle. To
tighten the belt, pull the loose end
of the belt through the tongue until
it fits snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
The front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have three
types of locking modes described as
follows:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Webbing extraction sensitive mode
The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents
more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly. The
belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
109
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (except a
booster) is installed in the vehicle. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer
to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in
this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
110
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all
passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that
the Љautomatic locking retractorЉ feature for child seats is still working
properly. Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized
dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver and front
outboard passenger. Adjust the
height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
press the button and slide the
height adjuster down. To raise the
height of the shoulder belt, press
the button and slide the height
adjuster up. Pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
111
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minderா
The Belt-Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
112
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder feature.
If...
Then...
The driver’s and front passenger’s The Belt-Minder feature will not
safety belts are buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to
the on position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
activate.
The driver’s or front passenger’s The Belt-Minder feature is
safety belt is not buckled when
the vehicle has reached at least
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
3 mph (5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes chime sounds for six seconds every
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front passenger’s The Belt-Minder feature is
safety belt becomes unbuckled
for approximately one minute
while the vehicle is traveling at
least 3 mph (5 km/h) and more
than 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to on...
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
chime sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
113
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
Consider...
“Crashes are rare
events”
36700 crashes occur every day. The more
we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare”
events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us
will be seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far”
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles
(40 km) of home.
“Belts are
uncomfortable”
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable - try
different positions for the safety belt upper
anchorage and seatback which should be as
upright as possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry”
Prime time for an accident. Belt-Minder
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle
up.
“Safety belts don’t
work”
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce
risk of death to front seat occupants by
45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when no
other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my
clothes”
Possibly, but a serious crash can do much
more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly
if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with
don’t wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times
more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE
people. Children and younger brothers/sisters
imitate behavior they see.
“I have an airbag”
Airbags offer greater protection when used
with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not
designed to inflate in rear and side crashes
or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown
clear”
Not a good idea. People who are ejected
are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety
belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK
OUR CRASH”.
114
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
One-time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the safety belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one-time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderா feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disabled/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The gearshift is in P (Park).
• The ignition switch is in the off position.
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled.
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
115
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately one
minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt nine times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state. Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by
three seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
116
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the air bag module as a
deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that an
authorized dealer inspect all steering column assemblies in use
in vehicles involved in a collision. Failure to inspect and if necessary
replace the steering column assembly could result in severe injury or
death in the event of a collision.
117
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
steering column, its adaptive module, or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the air bag module.
Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
118
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
WARNING: Front seating positions only: If seating two adults
and a child, Ford recommends properly restraining the child in
the center front seating position, but only if doing so will not interfere
with driving the vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder
belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment
method for a child restraint. If the child seat interferes with driving the
vehicle and the child restraint is forward-facing, the child may be
restrained in the passenger seat. Move the seat as far rearward as
possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front
passenger airbag. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear
their safety belts. Ensure the child is properly restrained in an
appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster.
119
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
120
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The SRS consists of the following items:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags)
• safety belt pretensioners
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
• Driver and passenger side airbags
• One or more impact and safing sensors
• A readiness light and tone
• A diagnostic module
• The electrical wiring which connects the components
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits as well as the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
WARNING: If the safety belt pretensioners deploy in an
accident, they will not function again (belt will not extract or
retract) and must be replaced immediately. Failure to replace the
retractor assemblies will increase the risk of injury.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
121
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side
airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or
Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located on the instrument panel to the right of the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
122
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Occupant
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Unlit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
Disabled
unbuckled
Adult
Unlit
Enabled
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
123
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Objects
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. three-ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Unlit
Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Lit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
124
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag Status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is
no longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.
125
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could
affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
126
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable nylon bag (airbag)
with a gas generator concealed
behind the outboard bolster of
the driver and front passenger
seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located near the side of the vehicle.
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
127
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the side airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
128
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
129
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
Use a child safety
toddlers less (generally age four or younger) seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
children longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, are greater than age four (4)
and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer)
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
children longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least across the hips,
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or shoulder belt
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb centered across the
(45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer)
shoulder and chest,
and seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
130
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
(lower (lower belt belt and belt
anchors anchors and
Safety
Restraint Child
LATCH
(lower
only
Type
Weight
and
only)
top
top
tether
anchor)
tether anchors
anchor and top
tether
anchor)
Rear
facing
Up to
48 lb
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward Up to
facing
child seat (21 kg)
Forward Over
facing
48 lb
X
X
X
X
X
48 lb
child seat (21 kg)
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
131
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
132
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
133
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
134
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
135
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
136
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Installing child safety seats in the lap belt seating positions
WARNING: Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap
seating position should be avoided if at all possible.
WARNING: Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front
center seating position of a vehicle with rear seating positions.
WARNING: Front seating positions only: If seating two adults
and a child, Ford recommends properly restraining the child in
the center front seating position, but only if doing so will not interfere
with driving the vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder
belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment
method for a child restraint. If the child seat interferes with driving the
vehicle and the child restraint is forward-facing, the child may be
restrained in the passenger seat. Move the seat as far rearward as
possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front
passenger airbag. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an
active airbag. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear
their safety belts. Ensure the child is properly restrained in an
appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster.
137
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To
lengthen the belt, hold the tongue
so that its bottom is perpendicular
to the direction of webbing while
sliding the tongue up the webbing.
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap
belt webbing to tighten the belt.
6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat
from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be
no more than one inch (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
7. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Note: There is no top tether anchor for the front center seating position.
See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
138
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety
restraints for children in this chapter for more information.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback,
below the locator symbols on the
seat back. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching
child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of
the child seat only to the anchors shown.
139
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Two plastic LATCH guides can be obtained at no charge from an
authorized dealer. They snap onto the LATCH lower anchors in the seat
to help attach a child seat with rigid attachments. The guides hold the
seat trim away to expose the anchor and make it easier to attach some
child seats.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
570 mm (22.4 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
140
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located under a cover marked
with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your
vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed, using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
141
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
142
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
143
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
144
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
145
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
146
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
147
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
148
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
149
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
150
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ЉblowoutЉ, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
151
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
152
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
153
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
154
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (138 kPa)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (138 kPa) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (if
equipped).
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged (if equipped).
155
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
156
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
157
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
158
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
186 mph (299 km/h)
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
159
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
160
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
161
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
162
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
163
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
164
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional
information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle. This includes the optional full-sized matching spare wheel
and tire, as it is intended for temporary use only.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
165
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Pressure
Warning Light
Solid Warning
Light
Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to
under-inflated ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in this
chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light will turn OFF.
Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use.
use
(This includes the optional full-sized
matching wheel and tire). Repair the
damaged road wheel/tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle to restore
system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use and
the light remains ON, have the
system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
166
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Pressure
Warning Light
Flashing Warning Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use.
Light
use
(This includes the optional full-sized
matching wheel and tire). Repair the
damaged road wheel and re-mount it
on the vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use and
the TPMS warning light still flashes,
have the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat,
repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
167
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only cable type chains offered by Ford Motor Company as an
accessory or equivalent. Using SAE class S or other conventional link
type chains may cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or
body.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
168
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
169
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
170
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
171
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
172
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
173
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
174
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing vehicle. Do not tow a
trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km).
Note: The L-series Town Car (extended length) is NOT rated for towing.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components
carefully after towing.
Your loaded trailer should weigh no more than 1,500 lb. (680 kg). Do
not exceed the GVWR specified on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
The GCW of your vehicle and trailer should not exceed 6,600 lb.
(2,993 kg).
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper. Use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
175
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components, do not trailer
tow during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a new vehicle.
• To ensure proper “break-in” of powertrain components during the first
500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing, drive no faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
176
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. For additional information, refer to Automatic
transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
177
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
All vehicles: Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow
your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
178
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. Off— shuts off the engine and all
accessories/locks the gearshift lever
and allows key removal.
2. Accessory— allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
3. On— all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights
illuminated. Key position when
driving.
4. Start— cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Refer to the SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system section in the
Locks and Security chapter for information on SecuriLock™ keys.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
179
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
OOD
H
180
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
5. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
181
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information on ethanol.
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions
(flexible fuel vehicles only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
182
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ЉSuitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.Љ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
183
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your
factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;
however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three
hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will
not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional
electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
184
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.
!
P
BRAKE
Parking brake with auto-release
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked.
To set the parking brake:
1. Move the gearshift to P (Park).
2. Press pedal downward.
OOD
H
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned to the on position)
until the parking brake is fully
released.
!
P
BRAKE
185
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake release. To release the
parking brake:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Move the gearshift from the P (Park) position to one of the forward
gears (the parking brake will not release automatically when you shift
into reverse). The brake pedal must remain pressed while the gearshift is
moved.
If the parking brake fails to release
after completing this procedure, use
the manual parking brake release
lever.
Pull the lever to manually release
the parking brake.
TRACTION CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a traction control system (except on
commercial conversion packages). This system helps you maintain the
stability and steerability of your vehicle, especially on slippery road
surfaces such as snow- or ice-covered roads and gravel roads. The
system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in
these conditions.
186
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
During traction control operation,
the traction control active light will
illuminate, you may hear an electric
motor type of sound coming from
the engine compartment and the
engine will not “rev-up” when you press farther on the accelerator. This
is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern.
WARNING: Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe
personal injury or property damage. The occurrence of a traction
control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this may lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. If you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
The traction control switch, located
on the left side of the instrument
panel, allows the driver to enable
and disable the system. When
disabled, the OFF will be
illuminated on the switch. The
traction control system will
automatically turn on every time the
ignition is turned to off and on.
If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road
surface, try switching the traction control system off. This may allow
excess wheel spin to “dig” the vehicle out and enable a successful
“rocking” maneuver. Remember to switch the traction control system
back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck.
If a system fault is detected, the traction control active light will
illuminate, the traction control button will not turn the system on or off
and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer.
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the
steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than
a few seconds when the engine is running.
187
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
It is also important to maintain a proper power steering fluid level in the
power steering fluid reservoir:
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level.
See Power steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the maximum
level, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir. See Power
steering fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is off), you
can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Accelerations
188
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by
automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs.
If you exceed the load limit, the rear air suspension may not operate.
The air suspension shut-off switch is
located on the left side of the trunk.
If this switch is in the off position,
the rear air suspension will not
operate.
WARNING: On vehicles
equipped with air
OFF
suspension, turn off the air
suspension switch prior to jacking,
hoisting or towing your vehicle.
Normal vehicle operation does not require any action by the driver.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to accessory.
189
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2. Locate the access plug on the
underside of the steering column
cover.
3. Remove the access plug using a
flat head screwdriver, then press
and hold the override button using a
flat head screwdriver. With the key
in the on position, apply the brake
pedal and shift the transmission into
N (Neutral) while continuing to
press the override button.
4. Reinstall the access plug cover,
start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
190
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
Overdrive can be deactivated by
pressing the transmission control
switch on the gearshift lever.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: heavy city traffic where continuous shifting in
and out of overdrive occurs, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing
and when engine braking is required.
191
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If necessary, try turning the Traction Control™ system off. This will
allow the wheels to spin, which may help to free your stuck vehicle. For
more information, refer to Traction Control™ in this chapter.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
192
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The reverse sensing system sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles
near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) gear is selected.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. The park assist is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the reverse sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting objects to avoid damaging the
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the reverse sensing system may create false
beeps.
The system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the
vehicle moves in reverse at speeds less than 6 mph (10 km/h). The
system is not effective at speeds greater than 6 mph (10 km/h) and may
not detect certain angular or moving objects.
193
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The system detects obstacles within approximately 16 feet (five meters),
at speeds above 2.5 mph (4 km/h) behind the rear bumper with a
decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. If vehicle
speed is below 2.5 mph (4 km/h), the system detects obstacles within
approximately 9 feet (2.6 meters) behind the rear bumper with a
decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. As you
move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the
distance to the obstacle is approximately less than 18 inches (45.0 cm),
the tone will sound continuously. If the system detects an object that is
approaching the vehicle at such a rate that rapid braking is required, a
very high rate tone will sound. If this tone is heard while reversing, the
driver is advised to slow down immediately until the tone either changes
to a slower rate or stops.
Audible Warnings
Distance to Object
Speed above 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
Warning
up to 1.6 feet (.5 meters)
1.6 feet (.5 meters) to 3.1 feet
(1 meter)
Solid
Fast beep
3.1 feet (1 meter) to 5.7 feet
(1.8 meters)
5.7 feet (1.8 meters) to 9 feet
(2.8 meters)
Medium/fast beep
Medium beep
9 feet (2.8 meters) to 13 feet
(4 meters)
Medium/slow beep
194
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Audible Warnings
Distance to Object
Warning
13 feet (4 meters) to 19.6 feet
(6 meters)
Slow beep
Speed below 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
up to 1.4 feet (.4 meters)
Solid
1.4 feet (.4 meters) to 3 feet
(.9 meters)
Fast beep
3 feet (.9 meters) to 4.5 feet
(1.4 meters)
4.5 feet (1.4 meters) to 6.3 feet
(1.9 meters)
6.3 feet (1.9 meters) to 8.7 feet
(2.6 meters)
Medium beep
Medium/slow beep
Slow beep
8.7 feet (2.6 meters) to 16.4 feet
(5 meters)
No sound
The reverse sensing system is automatically enabled when the gearshift
lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the
message center allows the driver to disable the system, refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
The message center will indicate the system is off and will not allow the
driver to switch the system on to indicate a failure of the reverse sensing
system.
The radar sensor is located behind the rear bumper/fascia. Always
keep the rear bumper/fascia free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. These elements may cause the system to
operate inaccurately.
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
195
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
196
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56.3 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
197
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S.
Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
198
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
FUEL
RESET
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
The fuel pump shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the electric
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
After a collision, if the engine cranks but does not start, the fuel pump
shut-off switch may have been activated.
The fuel pump shut-off switch is located on a bracket inside of the
luggage compartment.
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the off position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pressing the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the on position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the off position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
15
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
199
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
—
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A
3A
4A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A
—
—
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Brown
Red
Brown
Red
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
—
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
Brown
Black
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
200
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Protected Circuits
1
2
Starter relay coil
10A
Restraint control module (RCM),
Occupant classification sensor
(OCS), Passenger airbag
deactivation indicator (PADI)
Audio
3
4
10A
10A
Back-up lamps, Anti-lock brake
system (ABS)
5
6
7.5A
10A
Lighting control module (LCM)
Passive anti-theft system (PATS),
Powertrain control module (PCM)
relay coil, Ignition relay coil, Fuel
relay coil
7
10A
Wiper module
201
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
8
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Protected Circuits
Power decklid module (PDM),
Overdrive cancel switch, Cluster,
Compass module, LCM, Traction
Control™ switch
9
7.5A
Door lock switch illumination,
Heated seat switch illumination,
Electrochromatic mirror
Hazards
Turn signal
Audio
10
11
12
13
15A
15A
15A
10A
Extended rear park aide module,
Cluster
14
15
15A
10A
Adjustable pedals, Delayed
accessory relay coil
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) module
OBD II
16
17
20A
10A
A/C cycle switch, Heated seat
modules
18
19
15A
7.5A
LCM (Interior lighting)
Driver’s door module (DDM)
switches, PDM, Power mirrors,
Driver seat module (DSM), DDM,
PATS LED
20
21
22
23
24
10A
10A
10A
10A
15A
LCM (Right-hand low beam)
Analog clock, LCM (Illumination)
LCM (Left-hand low beam)
LCM
LCM (High beams), Multi-function
switch (Flash-to-pass)
DATC module, Cluster
25
10A
202
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
26
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A
Protected Circuits
LCM (Park lamps, cornering
lamps, license lamps)
Not used
Brake signal, LCM (BTSI), ABS
Not used
27
28
29
—
7.5A
—
30
—
Not used
31
5A
LCM (Key in)
32
33
7.5A
—
Delay accessory (audio)
Not used
K101
—
Delayed accessory
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
203
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
503
118
114
110
106
102
101
204
203
202
209
208
206
205
304
502
501
602
601
117
116
113
112
109
108
105
104
24
23
22
21
303
302
115
12
111
10
107
103
201
207
18
17
16
14
13
8
7
6
5
4
2
1
20
19
301
15
11
9
3
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A*
Protected Circuits
1
2
3
Ignition switch
Rear heated seats
Powertrain control module (PCM)
keep alive power and canister
vent
20A*
10A*
4
5
6
7
8
20A*
20A*
15A*
30A*
20A*
15A*
20A*
15A*
20A*
Fuel relay feed
Instrument panel power point
Alternator regulator
PCM relay feed
Driver’s door module (DDM)
Ignition coil relay feed
Horn relay feed
9
10
11
12
A/C clutch relay feed
Audio
204
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
13
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A*
Protected Circuits
Rear air suspension module
(RASM)
14
15
16
20A*
15A*
20A*
–
Stop lamp switch
Lumbar, Fuel door
Heated seats
17
Not used
18
–
Not used
19
20
21
22
15A*
15A*
15A*
—
Injectors
PCM
Powertrain loads and sensors
Not used
23
24
10A*
–
Heated mirrors
Not used
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
40A**
50A**
50A**
50A**
30A**
40A**
40A**
40A**
20A**
30A**
20A**
30A**
20A**
20A**
20A**
30A**
20A**
—
Blower relay feed
Cooling fan
Instrument panel fuse box feed #1
Instrument panel fuse box feed #2
Starter relay feed
ABS module (Pump)
Rear defroster relay feed
Power decklid module (PDM)
ABS module (Valves)
Wiper module
Left rear power point
RASM (Air compressor)
Rear power point #2
Instrument panel fuse box feed #3
Rear cigar lighters
Decklid pulldown module
Cigar lighter
Not used
205
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
201
Fuse Amp
Rating
Micro relay
—
Protected Circuits
A/C clutch
202
Not used
203
204
205
Micro relay
Micro relay
—
Ignition coil
PCM
Not used
206
207
Micro relay
—
Fuel
Not used
208
—
Not used
209
301
302
303
304
501
Micro relay
Mini relay
Mini relay
Mini relay
Mini relay
—
Horn
Starter
RASM (Air compressor)
Blower
Rear defroster
Not used
502
503
601
Diode
Diode
20A Circuit
Breaker
20A Circuit
Breaker
Reverse battery
Horn, Door latch
Power seats, driver seat module
602
Delayed accessory relay for
windows, audio
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
206
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
207
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
208
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Full-size Matching Spare Tire/Wheel Information
This spare tire/wheel will match the road tire/wheel. When driving with
the full size matching spare tire/wheel, do not exceed 70 mph
(113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if you
need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.
Tire change procedure
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the system indicator light will illuminate when the spare
is in use. To restore the full functionality of the TPMS system, all road
wheels equipped with the tire pressure monitoring sensors must be
mounted on the vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat tire serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor, refer
to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible.
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
209
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set parking
brake.
OOD
H
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park),
turn engine off and block the
diagonally opposite wheel.
3. Remove the spare tire and the jack. The jack could be located:
• under the full size spare tire or
• in the trunk, (in a holder
bracket), on the right-hand side,
next to the wheel well.
210
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: On vehicles
equipped with air
suspension, turn off the air
suspension switch prior to jacking,
hoisting or towing your vehicle.
OFF
Refer to Air suspension system in
the Driving chapter for more
information.
4. Remove the lug wrench (A) from
the jack. Rotate the lug wrench
socket out from the handle.
A
5. Locate pry off notch (if
equipped) and remove the center
ornament from the aluminum wheel
with the tapered end of the wheel
nut wrench that came with your
vehicle. Insert and twist the handle,
then pry against the wheel.
6. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
211
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Before placing the jack under the vehicle, NOTE the jack location
markings:
JACK LOCATION-FRONT
B
A
The jack location markings can be
found on the lower outer edge of
the body.
C
• Locate the jack locator mark
(B -semi-circle) on the body (C)
near the tire you are changing,
then place the jack (D) under
the frame (A) of the vehicle
aligning it with the mark
D
A
(B -semi-circle).
JACK LOCATION-REAR
B
The jack location markings can be
found on the lower outer edge of
the body.
C
• Locate the jack locator mark
(B -triangle) on the body (C)
near the tire you are changing,
then place the jack (D) under
the frame (A) of the vehicle
aligning it with the mark
D
(B -triangle).
• Position the jack according to the
following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
212
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: To lessen risk
of personal injury, do not
put any part of your body under
the vehicle while changing a tire.
Do not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
ONLY meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the rear differential
as a jacking point.
7. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
8. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
1
3
4
11. Put flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Be sure to stow the jack
properly in the holder bracket.
5
2
12. Turn on the air suspension
switch.
213
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
100
N•m
1
⁄
2
x 20
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
214
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
215
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the jumper cables
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
216
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
217
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
218
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
219
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
If equipped with an air suspension system, the air suspension control in
the luggage compartment must be turned to the off position before your
vehicle can be towed.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
220
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
221
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
222
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
223
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
224
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
225
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
226
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
227
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
228
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is available
from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42) which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
• After polishing chrome bumpers, apply a coating of Motorcraft
Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental
effects.
229
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
230
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
231
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
232
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
233
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a collision.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
234
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
235
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
236
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located in the grille.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
237
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Engine oil dipstick (access behind air tube)
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Power distribution box
10. Battery
238
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking
and smearing. Refer to the
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
239
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass. Turn the blade
as much as possible to gain access
to the lock tab (A). Using a skinny
tool, press the lock tab (A) to
release the blade from the arm loop
and pull the blade from the arm.
2. Attach the new blade to the arm
loop and pull it into place until a
click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait up to 15 minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
240
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
241
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
overfilled, some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks can be heard.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
242
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
243
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
244
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
245
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
246
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Do not mix coolants. Add the coolant type originally equipped
in your vehicle. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
247
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
248
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
249
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the H (hot) area.
• The
symbol will display in the message center.
• The message center will display COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE.
• A chime will sound.
• The service engine soon
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
250
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
251
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for
hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
• FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85 percent ethanol. Any fuel
blends containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as
“Fuel Ethanol.” To identify if your vehicle is an FFV, it may be
equipped with a yellow fuel cap with the text “E85/Gasoline”, or check
if there is a label on the fuel filler door.
252
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn
and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small
amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The
resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is
denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting. Refer to
Starting in the Driving chapter.
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded
gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
253
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel filler cap
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks at least once.
If the check fuel cap light
or a CHECK FUEL CAP message comes
on, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The light or message
can come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your
vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
254
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
light
or CHECK FUEL CAP message may not reset immediately; it
may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light
or CHECK
FUEL CAP message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine
start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city
and highway driving.
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light
or CHECK FUEL
CAP message on may cause the light to turn on as well.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap
is not used.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in
personal injury.
FFV (Flex Fuel Vehicle) fuel cap
If your vehicle is FFV capable, it will have a yellow colored fuel cap.
Choosing the right fuel
If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your
vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
255
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. Some stations offer fuels posted as
“Regular” with an octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However,
if it knocks heavily under most
87
driving conditions while you are
(R+M)/2 METHOD
using fuel with the recommended
octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
FFV engine (if equipped)
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol
(Ed75–Ed85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two
fuels.
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be
invalidated.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
If you operate your vehicle 50% or more of the time on ethanol, you
should follow a different maintenance schedule. In addition to this, if you
exclusively use E85 fuel, it is also recommended to fill the fuel tank with
regular unleaded gasoline once every 3,000 miles (4,800 km). See
scheduled maintenance information for more information.
Fuel quality
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
256
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
indicator, refer to
information on the service engine soon
Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
257
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
258
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
259
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact
your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
260
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
261
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon
indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
262
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
indicator stays on
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to scheduled maintenance
information.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
263
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
R
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the MAX line that
do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek
service from your authorized dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about
30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
264
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F
[66°C-77°C]).
265
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
266
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Changing the air filter element
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered
air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
7. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.
Note: Be sure the hinge features of the air filter cover to the air filter
housing are fully engaged when reassembling the air filter assembly.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
267
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Fuel filter
4.6L V8 engine
FA-1032
FG-986B
Battery-standard
Battery-heavy duty
Oil filter
BXT-65-650
BXT-65-750
1
FL-820-S
2
Spark plugs
1Included in long wheelbase package.
2For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
268
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
270
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
271
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
4.6L V8 engine
281
4.6L FFV V8 engine
281
Required fuel
87 octane
87 octane or ethanol
(E-85)
Firing order
Ignition system
Spark plug gap
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
9.4:1
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Coil on plug
0.041–0.047 inch
(1.04–1.20 mm)
9.4:1
Compression ratio
Engine drivebelt routing
272
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
273
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description
Code
Four-speed automatic (4R75E)
Q
274
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Side deflectors
Interior style
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Cargo organization and management
275
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
Peace of mind
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
Wheel locks
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
276
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
277
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades
• Spark plugs
• Brake pads and linings
• Shock absorbers
• Belts and hoses
(except California)
• Clutch disc
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
278
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ford Extended Service Plan
279
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
D
Defrost
Dipstick
Compass, electronic
Console
Controls
E
Coolant
Emergencies, roadside
281
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
G
F
H
I
Instrument panel
282
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
J
M
K
Keyless entry system
O
L
Lamps
P
Locks
283
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
R
S
Steering wheel
T
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
284
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
U
V
W
Windows
285
2010 Town Car (tow)
Owners Guide, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|